Product

The Product table contains one row for each goods or service.

You can also use this table to define, for example, standard texts and group discounts to be filled in on an order line when typing the pseudo product no.

There is no reference field to default suppliers in the Product table. You enter current suppliers of the product by using the Delivery alternative table. You can also define default suppliers per warehouse in the Stock balance table. To enter prices for a product, you use the Price- and discount matrix table. If you want to differentiate between prices of special groups of products, you can divide products into product price groups.

You can use the Alternative product table to define which alternatives are available if the product is sold out or no longer in production. If you want to have the product name printed on order documents in the customer's language, you can use the Product description table and insert the product name in various language numbers.

The Processing method in the Processing menu in Product table has a large number of options that you can use to control how Business NXT processes each product or underlying structure goods.

PropertyValueDescription
DatabaseCompanyThis table is in the company databases.
SQL nameProdThe table name in the database.
API identifierproductThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Table no.114The table number in the data model.

The following fields exist in this table:

Area

The area of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameAreaUThe database field name.
API identifierareaThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5904 

Buyer

The employee who is responsible for purchasing the product.

The Empl. no. is a unique number identifying one specific Employee.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainEmpl. no.Integer
SQL nameBuyerThe database field name.
API identifierbuyerThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3075 
Table 1. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
AssociateBuyer
  • Buyer

Change time in ms

The time when changes were made in milliseconds.

Used in the integration between Zpider and Business NXT. With this field, the changes you make in Business NXT are updated in Zpider immediately.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainNo.Integer
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameChTmmsThe database field name.
API identifierchangeTimeInMsThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number16616 

Cost price addition %

The percentage by which the net purchase price after line discounts must increase to match the cost price. Consignment costs are also included in the cost prices. This is only applicable for purchase orders.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainPercentDecimal
SQL nameCstPrAddThe database field name.
API identifiercostPriceAdditionPercentThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4931 

Customs stat. no.

An information field that can be used on consignment notes.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainString of length 12Text (12)
SQL nameCusStNoThe database field name.
API identifiercustomsStatisticsNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2599 

Default unit

The unit suggested when the product is added to an order line.

Unit texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 16.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Unit in the Text table.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultYesThis field is visible by default in the table display.
DomainUnitInteger
SQL nameStSaleUnThe database field name.
API identifierdefaultSalesUnitsThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2584 
Table 2. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
UnitUnit
  • Default unit

Density

The density of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameDensUThe database field name.
API identifierdensityThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6261 

Description

The description of Product.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultYesThis field is visible by default in the table display.
DomainDescriptionText (60)
SQL nameDescrThe database field name.
API identifierdescriptionThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2579 

EAN item no.

The international article number assigned to the product.

An EAN/GTIN item number has either 8 or 13 digits. The 8-digit version is used for small packages. EAN/GTIN codes with 13 digits are unique all over the world, and the 2 or 3 first digits identify the country where the code was assigned.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainEAN codeText (40)
SQL nameEANItmNoThe database field name.
API identifiereanItemNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number7562 

EU goods stat. no.

The number identifying type of product which makes it possible to gather unified data on the same type of product throughout the EU. All deliveries made and received within the EU during the reporting period must be reported in the INTRASTAT declarations.

This text type domain can hold 10 digits in order to comply with EU regulations.

EU goods stat. no. texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 135.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a EU goods stat. no. in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainEU goods stat. no.Integer
SQL nameEUStatNoThe database field name.
API identifiereuGoodsStatisticsNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5024 

Exchange quantity

How much of the raw material is required per unit of the finished product.

For example the amount of grams of gold per unit of a ring.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameExQtyThe database field name.
API identifierexchangeQuantityThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4568 

Factor 3

Instead of entering a quantity directly in the Order line table, you can have it calculated as the difference between the To and From fields or as the product of them and the Factor 3 field.

When the quantity is calculated as the difference between the To and From fields, it can be expressed as a quantity, time or date, depending on the quantity format selected in the Proc. method 1 field in the Order line table. If the Factor 3 field does not have any value in the Order line table, the value in this field will be imported.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameFactor3The database field name.
API identifierfactor3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5048 

Free 1

Additional numeric information about the product.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameFree1The database field name.
API identifierfree1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11261 

Free 2

Additional numeric information about the product.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameFree2The database field name.
API identifierfree2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11262 

Free 3

Additional numeric information about the product.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameFree3The database field name.
API identifierfree3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11263 

Free 4

Additional numeric information about the product.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameFree4The database field name.
API identifierfree4The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11264 

From

Used in conjunction with the To field for calculating the quantity.

When the quantity is calculated as the difference between to and from, it can be expressed as a quantity, time, date or factor, depending on the quantity format selected on the Editing page in the Proc. method 1 field in the Order line table.

In connection with hire/loan, you can enter the hire start date in this field when the quantity format is set to date.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameFrNoThe database field name.
API identifierfromThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5046 

Gr. 1

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 1 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 42.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 1 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 1Integer
SQL nameGrThe database field name.
API identifiergroup1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4303 

Gr. 2

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 2 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 43.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 2 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 2Integer
SQL nameGr2The database field name.
API identifiergroup2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4304 

Gr. 3

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 3 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 44.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 3 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 3Integer
SQL nameGr3The database field name.
API identifiergroup3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4305 

Gr. 4

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 4 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 45.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 4 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 4Integer
SQL nameGr4The database field name.
API identifiergroup4The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4306 

Gr. 5

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 5 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 46.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 5 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 5Integer
SQL nameGr5The database field name.
API identifiergroup5The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4307 

Gr. 6

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 6 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 47.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 6 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 6Integer
SQL nameGr6The database field name.
API identifiergroup6The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4308 

Gr. 7

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 7 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 98.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 7 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 7Integer
SQL nameGr7The database field name.
API identifiergroup7The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6061 

Gr. 8

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 8 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 99.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 8 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 8Integer
SQL nameGr8The database field name.
API identifiergroup8The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6062 

Gr. 9

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 9 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 100.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 9 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 9Integer
SQL nameGr9The database field name.
API identifiergroup9The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6063 

Gr. 10

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 10 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 101.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 10 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 10Integer
SQL nameGr10The database field name.
API identifiergroup10The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6064 

Gr. 11

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 11 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 102.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 11 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 11Integer
SQL nameGr11The database field name.
API identifiergroup11The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6065 

Gr. 12

A group to which the product belongs.

Product grouping 12 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 103.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product grouping 12 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct grouping 12Integer
SQL nameGr12The database field name.
API identifiergroup12The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6066 

Gross weight

The sum of values in the Net weight and Tare fields.

Prices and discounts can be specified not only on the basis of the ordinary quantity field but also this field.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
Memory fieldYesThe value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database.
API identifiergrossWeightThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5900 

Group sep.

Used to restrict the extent of group discounts or group totals.

On the Misc. page in the Proc. method 1 field you can configure a product to be used as a Group discount or Group total. When using several group discount on an order, those can be linked into one. If they is to be handled separately you can add a value in this field.

Group discounts and totals are calculated by the above order lines up to any initial group separator and can be combined in an unlimited number of levels. This field indicates the beginning of the group.

When you use groups inside other groups without a group separator in between, you produce chain discounts/additions of discounts/additions granted previously.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainGroup sep.Integer
SQL nameGrSepThe database field name.
API identifiergroupSeparatorsThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5010 

Height

The height of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameHgtUThe database field name.
API identifierheightThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5903 

Incm. doc. no.

The source of the most recent update from the supplier.

The value is set automatically when updating product data from Incoming product data. The field contains a lookup to the Incoming document table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainNo.Integer
SQL nameInDocNoThe database field name.
API identifierincomingDocumentNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number18459 
Table 3. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Incoming documentIncomingDocument
  • Incm. doc. no.

Inf. 1

Additional product or structure information.

The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainInf. @Text (40)
SQL nameInfThe database field name.
API identifierinformation1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3535 

Inf. 2

Additional product or structure information.

The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainInf. @Text (40)
SQL nameInf2The database field name.
API identifierinformation2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3536 

Inf. 3

Additional product or structure information.

The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainInf. @Text (40)
SQL nameInf3The database field name.
API identifierinformation3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3537 

Inf. 4

Additional product or structure information.

The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainInf. @Text (40)
SQL nameInf4The database field name.
API identifierinformation4The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3538 

Inf. 5

Additional product or structure information.

The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainInf. @Text (40)
SQL nameInf5The database field name.
API identifierinformation5The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3539 

Inf. 6

Additional product or structure information.

The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainInf. @Text (40)
SQL nameInf6The database field name.
API identifierinformation6The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3540 

Inf. 7

Additional product or structure information.

The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainInf. @Text (40)
SQL nameInf7The database field name.
API identifierinformation7The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6093 

Inf. 8

Additional product or structure information.

The field can be included in the order line as additional information and also be printed on a order document.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainInf. @Text (40)
SQL nameInf8The database field name.
API identifierinformation8The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6094 

Length

The length of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameLgtUThe database field name.
API identifierlengthThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5901 

Memo file name

The file name for the Memo attached to the product.

The memo file can contain, for example, a product description, environmental information and product information which should be linked to a product.

On the Editing menu, click Memo to create a new memo or to view the existing memo. The memo file name is saved in this text box.

Double-click or press * to open the Select file dialog box to manually select a memo file.

Note:
It is important that you save the file on a server and in a folder that is available to all users, otherwise users who try to open the memo will receive an error message.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainMemo file nameText (260)
SQL nameNoteNmThe database field name.
API identifiermemoFileNameThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4237 

Memo no.

Link to the memo for the entry.

The actual memo is stored in the Memo table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainMemo no.Integer
SQL nameMemoNoThe database field name.
API identifiermemoNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number19232 
Table 4. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
MemoMemo
  • Memo no.

Net weight

The net weight of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameNWgtUThe database field name.
API identifiernetWeightThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2596 

New product no.

The new number that the product will be assigned when you run the Change Product no. processing.

Note:
It is not possible to add an existing product number into the New product no. field.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct no.Text (40)
SQL nameNwProdNoThe database field name.
API identifiernewProductNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number7363 

Next serial no.

This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainNo.Integer
SQL nameNxtSerNoThe database field name.
API identifiernextSerialNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number12707 

Normal warehouse

The warehouse where the product usually is located.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultYesThis field is visible by default in the table display.
DomainWarehouse no.Integer
SQL nameNrmStcThe database field name.
API identifiernormalWarehouseNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2594 
Table 5. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
WarehouseNormalWarehouse
  • Normal warehouse
Stock balanceNormalStockBalance
  • Product no.
  • Normal warehouse
This is a combined foreign key. Making a lookup in one of the fields may also fill in value in the others.

Organisational unit 1

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainOrganisational unit no.Integer
SQL nameR1The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4587 
Table 6. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 1OrgUnit1
  • Organisational unit 1

Organisational unit 2

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainOrganisational unit no.Integer
SQL nameR2The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4588 
Table 7. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 2OrgUnit2
  • Organisational unit 2

Organisational unit 3

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainOrganisational unit no.Integer
SQL nameR3The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4589 
Table 8. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 3OrgUnit3
  • Organisational unit 3

Organisational unit 4

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainOrganisational unit no.Integer
SQL nameR4The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit4The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4590 
Table 9. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 4OrgUnit4
  • Organisational unit 4

Organisational unit 5

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainOrganisational unit no.Integer
SQL nameR5The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit5The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4591 
Table 10. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 5OrgUnit5
  • Organisational unit 5

Organisational unit 6

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

Organisational units fields can be used freely according to company needs to split accounting, sales and purchases into organisational units. The most common types are department, project and campaign. It is also possible to limit the organisational units a user should see by limiting the organisational units in the Limitation groups, User limitation groups and Limitations. The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainOrganisational unit no.Integer
SQL nameR6The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit6The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number4592 
Table 11. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 6OrgUnit6
  • Organisational unit 6

Organisational unit 7

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainLong alphanumeric organisational unit no.Text (40)
SQL nameR7The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit7The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number9600 
Table 12. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 7OrgUnit7
  • Organisational unit 7

Organisational unit 8

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainShort alphanumeric organisational unit no.Text (10)
SQL nameR8The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit8The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number9601 
Table 13. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 8OrgUnit8
  • Organisational unit 8

Organisational unit 9

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainShort alphanumeric organisational unit no.Text (10)
SQL nameR9The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit9The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number9602 
Table 14. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 9OrgUnit9
  • Organisational unit 9

Organisational unit 10

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainShort alphanumeric organisational unit no.Text (10)
SQL nameR10The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit10The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number9603 
Table 15. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 10OrgUnit10
  • Organisational unit 10

Organisational unit 11

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainShort alphanumeric organisational unit no.Text (10)
SQL nameR11The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit11The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number9604 
Table 16. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 11OrgUnit11
  • Organisational unit 11

Organisational unit 12

The organisational unit the product is assigned to.

The field appear with the name assigned to it in the Company information table.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainShort alphanumeric organisational unit no.Text (10)
SQL nameR12The database field name.
API identifierorgUnit12The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number9605 
Table 17. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Organisational unit 12OrgUnit12
  • Organisational unit 12

Period key

The period key to be transferred to the voucher line for accrual accounting of the sales and consumed goods accounts, e.g. products for rent and licence.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainPeriod keyInteger
SQL namePrKThe database field name.
API identifierperiodKeyNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number15866 
Table 18. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Period keyPeriodKey
  • Period key

Picture file name

A link to the picture file for the product.

The picture file is copied from the from the product to the order line if the Copy picture from product check box on the Misc. page in the Proc. method 1 field is selected.

Tip:
Double-clicking or pressing * in this box opens the picture. If the box is empty, a dialog box for selecting a picture file will open.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainPicture file nameText (260)
SQL namePictNoThe database field name.
API identifierpictureFileNameThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6625 

Plan type

The invoice plan type, used for Invoicing according to plan.

The value is suggested in the Order line table and also used in invoice plan lines to show what type of line it is.

A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:
1 - On account
This value can be selected if 1 - On account/settlement is selected in the Inv. according to plan field in the Order table.
2 - Fixed price
3 - Additional expenses
4 - Settlement
There is to be a settlement invoice on the date specified, and the fields for specifying what and how much you are to invoice will have no significance.

This value can be selected if 1 - On account/settlement is selected in the Inv. according to plan field in the Order table.

5 - Invoiced on account
This plan type is allocated automatically.
6 - Invoiced fixed price
This plan type is allocated automatically.
7 - Invoiced additional expenses
This plan type is allocated automatically.
8 - Invoiced settlement
This plan type is allocated automatically.
9 - Settled on account
This plan type is allocated automatically.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainPlan typeInteger
SQL nameInvoPlLnThe database field name.
API identifierplanTypeThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3058 

Previously product no.

The previous number if the product has been assigned a new number by running the Change Product no. processing.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct no.Text (40)
SQL nameOldPNoThe database field name.
API identifierpreviouslyProductNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number7188 

Price qty.

The number of units the price is valid for.

The price types which will be considered the price quantity in their calculations are defined in the Price quantity extent field in the Company information table. If the field is empty or has the value 1, the given price is used as the price per unit.

The price quantity cannot be changed if there are shipments linked to the product. You can only override the price quantity in order lines which are exempt from warehousing.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL namePrNoThe database field name.
API identifierpriceQuantityThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6173 

Price unit

The unit measurement for which prices, cost prices and consignment costs are valid.

A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:
1 - Quantity in base unit
2 - Length
3 - Area
4 - Volume
5 - Net weight
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainPrice unitInteger
SQL namePrUnThe database field name.
API identifierpriceUnitThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6172 

Proc. method 1

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 1Integer
SQL nameProcMtThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2595 

Proc. method 1b

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 1bInteger
SQL namePrM1bThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod1bThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6392 

Proc. method 1c

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 1cInteger
SQL namePrM1cThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod1cThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6563 

Proc. method 2

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 2Integer
SQL nameExcPrintThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3663 

Proc. method 2b

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 2bInteger
SQL namePrM2bThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod2bThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3671 

Proc. method 2c

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 2cInteger
SQL namePrM2cThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod2cThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6564 

Proc. method 3

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 3Integer
SQL nameEditPrefThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2587 

Proc. method 3b

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 3bInteger
SQL namePrM3bThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod3bThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6565 

Proc. method 3c

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 3cInteger
SQL namePrM3cThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod3cThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6566 

Proc. method 4

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 4Integer
SQL nameEdFmtThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod4The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2589 

Proc. method 4b

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 4bInteger
SQL namePrM4bThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod4bThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6567 

Proc. method 4c

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 4cInteger
SQL namePrM4cThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod4cThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6568 

Proc. method 5

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 5Integer
SQL nameSpecFuncThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod5The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2586 

Proc. method 5b

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 5bInteger
SQL namePrM5bThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod5bThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6569 

Proc. method 5c

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 5cInteger
SQL namePrM5cThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod5cThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6570 

Proc. method 6

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 6Integer
SQL nameExpStrThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod6The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3670 

Proc. method 7

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 7Integer
SQL nameProdProThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod7The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number8306 

Proc. method 8

Settings defining the behaviour of the product.

On all dialog box pages there is a double set of check boxes. The first column of check boxes is the main column, and this relates to the actual row. The second column is only relevant for structure products. This column describes the behaviour of the structure lines and is only available from the Product table and only when the product is a structure head.

A look-up opens the dialog box where you can see the following check boxes and options:

Warehousing

Exempt from warehousing
The product is, for example, a service and is not held in any warehouse must not be included in the warehousing routine. No tracking will be done for stock balances and stock changes, and there will be no shipments processed.
Note:
If an increase order line has some reservations linked to the order line's shipments, it will not be possible to select this field. You must first cancel the decrease orders that have reservations against this order line.

The new row after invoicing and finishing for hire of products will automatically be exempt from warehousing. If you have registered an order with a product which is to be hired out and the product which you have registered is in stock, the stock will be reduced on finishing.

Note:
If you try to write or copy a number that contains this check box, and something is reserved against the shipments for this order line, the following message appears in the Status bar: You are not allowed to turn off warehousing when something is reserved against any shipments on the reservation lines of the order line.

Reservation method

Reserve on save
The quantity will be reserved when you save.
Reserve from given shipment
The reservation on the order will only take place from this shipment.

When entering an order, you can also reserve the product on the order line from the transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan.

This only works if a shipment number has been entered on the order line regardless of the transaction type. If a full delivery cannot be made, the surplus quantity is assigned to back order.

If this check box is not selected and a shipment number has been entered, the shipment number that is specified will be reserved. If the Shipment no. field is blank, it will be reserved in accordance with FIFO.

Only reserve if the whole quantity is available in stock
This option works with the parameter Reserve only if the whole quantity is available.
Suggest shipment no. 1
Shipment number 1 is suggested when you enter the product number on order lines.
Tip:
If you always want to use shipment number 1 you can select the Only one shipment field in the Company information table.
Note:
This is a method that we do not recommend for those running warehouse management of the products.
No reservation on goods received
Sales order lines are not reserved against purchase and production order lines when goods are received.

(From the Structure table)
Reserve available quantity
Reserve only if the whole quantity is available
The shipment is not reserved unless the whole quantity is available.
Meet reservations req. even if not available
This field is no longer in use. Be aware the field may be removed in later versions.

Picking method

Pick complete order line
If you have chosen to pick the entire order line, the order line is only included on printouts of pick lists if there are more of the remaining quantity that you can pick. If you have to pick the whole structure or the same share of the structure lines, this can also block structures from being picked. If you have to pick the whole order in one lot, you can find a corresponding option in the dialog box for customer and order options.
Do not withdraw picking if finishing less
No previous reservations or items picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.
Picking after invoicing
This option allows reservation handling to be postponed until invoicing has been done. The products are not picked on finishing and invoicing, and you can pick after invoicing. If you select this check box, and do not create reservations before invoicing, the following items are reduced on picking instead of on finishing/invoicing:
  • Stock and reservations in the Stock balance table.
  • Shipments.
  • Unrealised stock changes in the Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
Picking after invoicing will not work if using Reserve on save or creating manual reservations.
If the products are not picked before finishing or invoicing, only the Finished and Invoiced/realised quantity fields in the order lines are updated, and accounting vouchers are generated. Product transactions are not created, as there is nowhere to save the references. Only when the lines are picked, either by printing a pick list or using the Pick NOW field, are Reservation and Product transaction updated together with the Shipment, Stock balance and Stock change tables.
Note:
There are no product transactions for these invoicing actions until after picking.
Note:
Order lines that are processed in this way have two realisation journal lines:
  • One on invoicing, which does not have a product transaction to refer to.
  • One on picking, which does not have a Voucher jour. no. to refer to.
Note:
If you have selected the Picking after invoicing field, two lines are created in the Realisation journal table instead of one. One is created on invoicing, and one when the order is picked. The two lines have a different value in the Origin field:
  • 9 - Order processing
  • 38 - Order processing with picking after invoicing
If you would like to get payments in advance, the recommended method is to use the processing Create prepayment line in Order table.
Finish picked quantity with menu choice
You select this option if you want to finish what is missing by finishing the entire picked quantity.
Keep reservations even if picking less
No previous reservations beyond those already picked will be withdrawn when you finish them in an order line or reservation line.

Exception

Allow non-existent shipment numbers
A warning is given when you enter a shipment number that does not exist for a product or stock combination in an order line. If the shipment does not exist, a new shipment will be created with this number. The shipment can also have been deleted because it has been emptied. If you want to retain shipments you must select the Keep shipments check box under the Order processing 2 field in the Company information table.
Do not process shipments in FIFO order
Shipments are not investigated in FIFO order unless the reservation requirements can be satisfied.
Add shipments with negative availability
Shipments with negative availability will be added if there is still a balance to reserve, after all shipments of the product have been investigated. This also applies if it is a direct order, a cash order or a realised order.
Note:
When you create a negative shipment, the Serial no., Location, Use by date, Order no. and Cost price fields from the order line are transferred to the shipment. They are then also included in the Reservation table, in product transactions and when posting to accounts.
You can use the Add shipments with negative availability field to return goods in unrealised purchase order lines, even if the goods are reserved in a sales order.
Note:
In such instances no new "negative new shipment" is created, but instead the shipment to which the goods were delivered is assigned negative availability.

Serial number

Reservation

One shipment per unit at stock increase
You will have one shipment per item for a product. One shipment for each serial number is generated if there is a goods receipt, production credit note or other stock increases.
One reservation line per unit at stock reduction
You will have one reservation row per serial number for a product. One reservation row for each serial number is generated if there is a finished sales order, further processing, production or other stock reductions.

Select this field if you only want to generate reservations for outgoing deliveries with serial numbers and not for receipts. This will guarantee traceability of serial numbers, because one stock transaction is produced for each reservation.

Reserve serial no. at picking
By default there is no reservation when you have registered a product as a serial number. You must select this check box if you want the pick list to generate reservation lines. The order lines are processed by the pick list, which enables you to run the pick list and define which serial numbers were picked upon finishing. The Stock balance table is updated with the quantity reserved without reservation lines being automatically generated. The order line is updated in the Picked and Picked without reservation fields. When this order line is finished, the Stock balance table is not updated with the quantity reserved, as this was done when the pick list was printed.
Calculate "Finish NOW" when entering serial no.
The value in the Finish NOW field in the order line increases when you register the serial number in the Order line, Reservation and Serial no. tables. If you delete the serial number the value in the Finish NOW field is reduced.
Note:
If you want to add the serial number before finishing the stock increase in the Reservation table, you cannot select this check box.

Reject

Duplicate serial no.
You select this check box if you want to reject duplications of the same serial number for an order line in the Serial no. and Reservation tables. This also prevents duplicate entry with the bar code reader. If there is a stock increase in the Order line and Reservation tables, a check will be made in the Product transaction table to see whether this serial number has been used before.
Non-existent serial no.
A check is done if the registered serial number is in the Shipment table. You receive a message in the status bar from the Order line and Reservation tables if the serial number already exists, while in the Serial no. table you receive a message dialog box on screen.

Structure

Structure head

Product is structure head

Expand structure on transaction type

Sales
Hire
Loan
Adjustment/internal issue
Further processing
Purchase
Production
Stock transfer

Picking of structures

(From the Structure table)
Pick individual structure lines
Pick same fraction of structure lines
The same proportion of the quantities in all structure lines is picked as is included in the structure. The order line with the lowest share determines how much is picked. If not everything in the structure line is picked, the share is calculated as follows: The quantity picked in each structure line is rounded off to the closest number divisible by the quotient of the total number of structure lines and the total number in the structure head. The Balance to pick field in the structure head shows how many complete structure still have to be picked.
Pick complete structure
The structure can only be picked if the quantities can be picked.
Distribute amounts on structure lines
The amount in the structure head is distributed among the structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Weights: distribution then takes place in accordance with the values in the Structure weight field in the Structure table. The amount in a structure line is set equal to the amount in the structure head multiplied by the weight of the line and divided by the sum of the weights.
  • Calculate prices: The prices in the structure lines are calculated at the same time as the amount in the line divided by the quantity in the line. This selection applies to structure heads with transaction type 1, and mean that the check box is selected so that prices are not retrieved for structure lines when the structure is expanded.
  • Process substructures: If you choose to expand substructures in the Structure table, the amount in a substructure line is distributed down among sub-product lines. You must check the option to distribute amounts among structure lines in the 2nd column in the dialog box for the structure head or in the Structure table.
  • Recalculate: If you change prices, discounts or other fields that change the amount in the current currency in the order line for a structure heading, the amounts and prices in the structure line will be recalculated.
Finish structure line from structure head
You can finish a structure from the Main product and it will calculate a relationship for the structure lines. This also assumes that the check for Pick same fraction of structure lines has been used.
Do not calculate price quantity in structure head
The amount in the structure head is multiplied by the price quantity of the product in the structure head, and not by the price quantity of orders with transaction type 7 - Production.

Structure lines

Accumulate in structure head

Revenue
Revenue in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. If you have orders with transaction types 2 - Hire and 3 - Loan, you must have specified the hire price in the Price- and discount matrix table. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding check box for posting revenue in the After processing tab.
Sales costs
The costs in sales order lines will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting costs in the After processing tab.
Production costs
Costs and amounts in production orders will be accumulated in the structure head. Accumulation takes place when you save and in order documents. To avoid duplicate posting, you must select the corresponding box for posting production costs in the After processing tab.
Fixed quantity (regardless of qty. in structure head)
The quantity in the structure line is not multiplied by the quantity in the structure head when the structure expands, or if you subsequently change the quantity in the structure head.
Add lead time from structure head
The lead time and transport time in the structure head are added when calculating the preferred delivery date and arrival/departure date for purchase and production orders. The lead time and transport time from the structure line are also added.
Expand substructure
Display the substructures in the order lines.
Raw material

Prices

Do not get

Sales price
The sales price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on sale
The cost price is not called up to sales order lines.
Cost price on production
The cost price and the price are not called up to production order lines.

Resuggesting price

Do not resuggest price/discount
No lookup is performed in the Price- and discount matrix in the sales, hire and purchase order lines. This only applies if you have already filled in the Price field. Reserving from shipment will override the cost price even if the setting is on.
Note:
This selection does not affect the updating of prices when you run the Recalculate prices processing. Nor does it affect price updates made elsewhere in Business NXT. This selection only affects the price update when entering an order.
Set "Do not resuggest price/discount" when saving
Do not use "price from quantity format" even if flag is set

Discount calculation

Do not calculate discount from standard price
You select this check box if you do not want to calculate a discount from the standard price fields in the current currency and default currency when referring to the Price and discount matrix. Applies to sales, hire and purchase order lines. When you post to the accounts, any change to the price in the order line compared to the price suggested from the Price and discount matrix is not posted as a discount.
Suggest price after discount and rounding
The discount is deducted from the price immediately by referring to the Price- and discount matrix in the sales and hire order lines.
Exempt from total discount
No total discount is calculated for such order lines.

Quantity and price calculation

Calculate price from quantity format
The price rather than the quantity is calculated from the From, To and Factor 3 fields. This depends on which quantity format you have selected. No reference is made to the Price- and discount matrix.
Amount/Share specifies amount to be invoiced so far
The amount or share in the order line is treated as invoiced so far after this invoice. This can apply to both on account and fixed prices.
Share calculated from total incurred costs
The price is calculated as a share of the value in the Inc. cost total field on the order instead of the default Contract amount field.

Cost price calculation

Get cost price from price and discount matrix
The cost price in decrease order lines is retrieved from the Price- and discount matrix instead of the Stock balance table. In the Reservation table the actual cost prices are still retrieved from the shipments. You should not check the box for services or other products that are not to be included in warehousing. In this instance the cost prices from the Price- and discount matrix will be retrieved. If you have selected the Get cost price from price and discount matrix and Do not resuggest price/discount fields, the cost price is retained, even if you select a shipment with another cost price. If you have not selected the Calculate cost from the order line's cost price field, the cost price of the shipment is also used for product transactions and in posting.
Calculate avg. cost price on the order line
You select this check box if you want to set the cost price in the order line as a weighted average of the cost prices in the reservation lines. The value is set when you reserve or change cost prices for decrease order lines in the Reservation table. This is based on the reserved quantities and cost prices when the entire quantity on the order line is reserved.
Calculate cost from the order line's cost price
The costs are calculated and posted from the order line's cost price.
Note:
The Temporary costs field under Trans. status will then not be selected, and the product transactions are not updated with the correct cost price upon receipt of goods, but retain the value from the order line.

The cost price will follow the transaction throughout the chain. The cost price in the order line is used for posting and statistics. This means that this cost price is not updated if the product is delivered on a subsequent occasion with a different cost price. You must therefore make changes in the accounts yourself if prices change.

Do not update sales order lines for price refunds
The prices in the sales order lines and refund lines are not updated.

Visma.net settings

Do not deduct VAT from Expense price on orders

Editing

Quantity format

(From the Structure table)
Quantity
Hours and minutes
Start and end date exclusive
Start and end date inclusive
Factors

Quantity calculation

Do not suggest incurred as quantity
You can select this check box if you do not want to duplicate the values in the Incurred quantity field in the Quantity field. If you want to invoice anything you must complete the field yourself.
Calculate quantity from weight/dimension
You select this option if you want to calculate the Quantity field in the order lines when you enter the quantity in base unit, dimensions or weight in total for the line. The appropriate 'per unit' factor will automatically be divided.
Delete rest when filling in "Finish NOW"
There will be nothing left over, as the Quantity field is set equal to the Finish NOW field when you fill in Finish NOW. Disregard obligatory fields.
Exchange arrangement

Enter

Description
The cursor stops in the Description field. This can be required if the product number acts as a common number for several products, or if there is a text line.
From and to/factors
The cursor stops in the From, To and Factor 3 fields and skips Incurred.

Restrictions

Exempt from

Returning
Finishing
Acceptance
Invoice received
Goods received
Sent from supplier
Purchase confirmation
Recalculate prices
Cancelling
Order generation
The order line is not generated on automatic order generation. The Exempt from order generating flag is set automatically in the Order line status field when the order line is created.
Calc. of additional cost
The product will be exempt from cost price addition and freight costs from the order head.

If you want to exempt entire orders from processing, you can find appropriate options in the 3rd column of the dialog box for the Processing > Order status menu item.

Note:
This does not apply for cost calculation.

Exempt from cost calculation does not then complete the line with distributed costs from the order head.

Mandatory fields

Locations on increase
Disregard mandatory fields
If you have selected the Mandatory box in the dialog box for the Edit/Entry rules menu item, you see red question marks in the fields in the order lines. If you select this check box the question marks will be hidden.

Processing methods

Processing methods locked

Printout

Include on pick list

(From the Structure table)
The order line
The structure
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.
The order
Order lines are only included in pick lists if you pick something in them. Or you can choose to include them if something is picked in any of the lines. It can be a structure in which they are included, or when something is picked in the order. You can define the Structure option for both structure heads and structure lines. The option of whether the order line is printed in the pick list if something has been picked from the structure also applies if the structure head has been picked.

Suppress

Product no.
Product no. will be hidden. For example, it might be appropriate not to display product numbers if they are used as text and group discount codes.
Quantity
Quantity will be hidden.
Price and discount
Price and Discount will be hidden.
Amount
Amount will be hidden.
Cost price and cost
Cost price and cost will be hidden.
Requested delivery date
Required delivery date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Confirmed delivery date
Confirmed delivery date will be hidden. You might want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Other dates
Original confirmed delivery date, Sent date and Arrival/departure date will be hidden. You might also want to exempt delivery dates from printing on structure lines if you are going to delivery the structure collectively.
Memo
Order line memos will not be displayed on order documents.

Excluded on

Invoices/credit notes
The order line is excluded on invoices and credit notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals. Invoices and credit notes are entered into the statistics and posted to the accounts.

Consignment notes
The order line is excluded on consignment notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Packing slips
The order line is excluded on packing slips.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Pick lists
The order line is excluded on pick lists.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Delivery notes
The order line is excluded on delivery notes.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Order confirmations
The order line is excluded on order confirmations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Quotations
The order line is excluded on quotations.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Purchase orders
The order line is excluded on purchase orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Inquiries
The order line is excluded on inquiries.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

Production orders
The order line is excluded on production orders.

Even if order lines are exempted from printing, they are still included in the totals.

If 0
The order line is excluded if the quantity is 0.
Tip:
This can be relevant in connection with structures in which you enter quantities after expansion and do not want to display lines with no quantities.

Post processing

Do not include totals

Revenue
You can select the Revenue check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of amounts/weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when either the price is suggested in both places, or amounts are accumulated in the structure head. Weights and dimensions can also seperately be excluded from being calculated from the order line to the order head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Sales costs
You can select the Sales costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Production costs
You can select the Production costs check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling of costs in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when the cost price is suggested in both places, or costs are accumulated in the structure head.
Note:
Selecting this check box also omits the row from being posted.
Weight and Volume
You can select the Weight and Volume check box if you do not want an order line to be included in order totals and group totals. You then avoid duplicate totalling weights and dimensions in the structure head and structure lines. This can be when values are suggested in both places, or accumulated in the structure head.

Exclude from accounting

Revenue
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Sales costs, if exempt from warehousing
If you have selected this field and select the Exempt from warehousing field under Processing method/Warehouse, the Sales costs field is automatically selected under Processing method/Post processing/Exclude from accounting. If you deselect the Exempt from warehousing field, the Sales costs field is automatically deselected. This also applies to the Exempt from warehousing field in the Order line table.
Production costs
If you select the Revenue check box the totals are not posted to accounts. When you choose to exempt totals, the corresponding check box to exempt from posting is greyed out. If the order line is not to be included when you post revenue, it is not included in the d/c ledger amount and in general ledger transactions for sales, discounts, additions, special taxes, invoice fees, VAT and rounding. If costs are not to be included when you post to accounts, no voucher is produced with general ledger transactions for product cost, freight and customs. Even if amounts in structure lines are accumulated in the structure head, you can choose to post the structure lines instead of the structure head. This is useful because they can have different tax and accounting groups and account sets.
Note:
Selecting this option will also exclude accounting of transaction types 5 - Further processing, 8 - Stock transfer and 4 - Adjustment/internal issue, including corrections from stock count.

Exclude from statistics

Revenue
The price fields and amounts are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Sales costs
The cost price fields for sales are not filled in for product transactions.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.
Production costs
The cost price fields for incurred costs are not filled in for product transactions. This selection applies to fields showing both current price/amount and cost price etc.
Note:
If you have chosen not to include both revenue and costs in statistics, no product transactions are produced. This might be relevant, for example, when limiting space and time for products that you no longer need to follow up for statistical purposes.

Other accounting rules

Post temp. stock value
You post the debit/credit product cost upon finishing, and upon receipt of invoice and invoicing these postings are reversed.
Accrual accounting to end of year
You can apply accrual accounting of income and expenses from a sale from the sales date until 31.12.
Note:
This calculation does not use accounting periods, but is valid for the calendar year.

Misc.

Group processing

(From the Structure table)
None
Group discount
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.
Group total
You can insert lines into orders to calculate group discounts or group totals. You enter the product number into a row in the Product table, where you have selected Group discount or Group total in the Processing dialog box. You can also insert default text in the Description field. You enter the size of the discount or addition in the Discount fields in the order line. You show additions with a minus sign. You can also complete the Discount fields yourself if you select Group total, which causes the discount to be deducted from the total that you see in the line.

Time to next invoice

Weeks instead of months
If you do not check the Weeks instead of months box, the time unit for the Time to next field is months.
Always last day of month
A check here leads to the next order line being set to the last day of the month and will therefore be 30th, 31st pr 28th, depending on how many days there are in the month.
Use Quarter Days
Not used in this country, but Quarter days is a term unique to the UK and applies to the letting of property. The days are 25.3, 24.6, 29.9 and 25.12. It is assumed that a check has been inserted for the last of the month and if Quarter days has been checked, the Last of the month will be set.
One line per time unit
If you select the 1 line per time unit check box, one line is displayed per week or month.
No stock handling on new line
If you have filled in the Time to next field on an order line, e.g. in connection with a hire order, a new order line will be added when invoicing. This order line will not be stock handled if you have selected the No stock handling on new line.

Misc.

Product free of interest
The order line will be exempt from interest calculation.
Purchase product
You can select this option if the product is a purchase product that is not normally held in stock. You can call up the Purchase product field to the order line, showing the same selection. If you want to change the field, the associated Processing method field is also updated.
Suspended
Selected automatically when processing incoming product catalogue, if the product has transactions and is identified by the incoming catalogue as "deleted".

The parameter is for information only and has no functional use.

Memos and pictures

Copy memo from product
The memo from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.
Note:
If you have selected the Copy memo from product or Copy memo from structure check boxes on the Misc. page in the Processing method field in the Product table, only the file reference is copied from the Product table to the Order line table, not the physical file.

If you do not want anyone to make changes in the memo files for products, you must write-protect them.

Copy memo from structure
The memo file name entered in the structure lines is copied to the order lines.
Copy picture from product
The picture file name from the Product table is copied to the order lines so that it appears in the order.

External

External processing

Show on Web
This product will be shown in Zpider.
Exclude from CRM
This product will not transferred to Visma CRM.
Exclude from external system
Exclude from Visma Mobile
Exclude from Visma On Demand

Appointment

Agreement rules

Appointment product
Calculate full time over midnight

Update balance rules

Do not update invoiceable
The Quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update incurred
The Incurred is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Do not update reserved
The Time estimate in quantity is not updated in the Time schedule balance table.
Update overtime
The Overtime field in the Time schedule balance table is updated.

Overtime affects the Appointment balance incurred time and Overtime fields of the Time schedule balance table and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Note:
Special for the Appointment table: To select this value, the Wage sort and Wage rate no. must be filled. If either of these fields have a value, the Res. no. must be filled in to retrieve Wage sort and Wage rate no.
Update flex correction
The Flextime correction field in the Time schedule balance table is updated and in turn also the Flextime CB field.

Approval rules

Approve disabled
The Appointment cannot be approved.
Note:
Can only be changed by User with the Allow update on appointment processing approve disabled option selected in the User pref. field in the User table. If the Appointment is confirmed, this change does not affect the Time schedule balance and you must update the Time schedule balance manually.
Requires approval by responsible
The Official field must be selected for the Appointment. Can be selected if you select the rule to apply in the CRM processing dialog box in the Company information table.
Ignore credit check
The Appointment is excluded from credit control.

Transfer to order rules

Enabled
Disabled
Allow uncompleted
Must approve time schedule
Copy case number
This setting depends on which organisational unit number is defined in the Company information table in the Case org. unit field. The value for this organisational unit is copied to order number, so that you avoid entering the same value twice when the order number has the same number as the specified organisational unit. The field is used by Visma Lawyer.
Cost only
The price will not be transferred to an order line.
Get new price from price matrix
New prices from the Price- and discount matrix table is obtained when transferring to order.

Booking rules

Block overbooking
You cannot reserve a resource more than once in the same period.
Suppress partly booked message
You do not receive a message when you enter time for a resource which you partly booked.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProc. method 8Integer
SQL nameAgrProcThe database field name.
API identifierprocessingMethod8The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number12432 

Product category 1

The product category for the product.

Product category texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 145.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product category in the Text table.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct categoryInteger
SQL namePrCatNoThe database field name.
API identifierproductCategoryNo1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number8466 
Table 19. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Product categoryProductCategory1
  • Product category 1

Product category 2

The product category for the product.

Product category texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 145.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product category in the Text table.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct categoryInteger
SQL namePrCatNo2The database field name.
API identifierproductCategoryNo2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number8468 
Table 20. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Product categoryProductCategory2
  • Product category 2

Product category 3

The product category for the product.

Product category texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 145.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product category in the Text table.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct categoryInteger
SQL namePrCatNo3The database field name.
API identifierproductCategoryNo3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11970 
Table 21. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Product categoryProductCategory3
  • Product category 3

Product category 4

The product category for the product.

Product category texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 145.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product category in the Text table.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct categoryInteger
SQL namePrCatNo4The database field name.
API identifierproductCategoryNo4The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11971 
Table 22. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Product categoryProductCategory4
  • Product category 4

Product category 5

The product category for the product.

Product category texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 145.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product category in the Text table.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct categoryInteger
SQL namePrCatNo5The database field name.
API identifierproductCategoryNo5The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11972 
Table 23. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Product categoryProductCategory5
  • Product category 5

Product category 6

The product category for the product.

Product category texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 145.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product category in the Text table.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct categoryInteger
SQL namePrCatNo6The database field name.
API identifierproductCategoryNo6The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11973 
Table 24. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Product categoryProductCategory6
  • Product category 6

Product is structure head

The product is a structure head.

This field is a visualisation of the Product is structure head check box on the Structure page in the Proc. method 1 field.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainBooleanInteger
Memory fieldYesThe value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database.
API identifierproductIsStructureHeadThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number16451 

Product no.

A unique number identifying the product.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultYesThis field is visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct no.Text (40)
Primary keyYesProduct no.
SQL nameProdNoThe database field name.
API identifierproductNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2578 
Table 25. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
Stock balanceNormalStockBalance
  • Product no.
  • Normal warehouse
This is a combined foreign key. Making a lookup in one of the fields may also fill in value in the others.

Product price gr. 1

A group to which the product belongs. The value is used for looking up in the price and discount matrix.

Product price group 1 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 13.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product price group 1 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct price group 1Integer
SQL nameProdPrGrThe database field name.
API identifierproductPriceGroup1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2585 

Product price gr. 2

A group to which the product belongs. The value is used for looking up in the price and discount matrix.

Product price group 2 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 21.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product price group 2 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct price group 2Integer
SQL nameProdPrG2The database field name.
API identifierproductPriceGroup2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3076 

Product price gr. 3

A group to which the product belongs. The value is used for looking up in the price and discount matrix.

Product price group 3 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 72.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product price group 3 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct price group 3Integer
SQL nameProdPrG3The database field name.
API identifierproductPriceGroup3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3077 

Product template

The template product. If you enter a product number in this field, values are suggested from the template product. Already filled in values are not overridden.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct no.Text (40)
Memory fieldYesThe value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database.
API identifiertemplateProductNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number8749 
Table 26. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
ProductProductTemplate
  • Product template
Search productSearchProductTemplate
  • Product template

Product type 1

A group to which the product belongs.

Product type 1 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 19.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product type 1 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct type 1Integer
SQL nameProdTpThe database field name.
API identifierproductType1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2581 

Product type 2

A group to which the product belongs.

Product type 2 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 58.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product type 2 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct type 2Integer
SQL nameProdTp2The database field name.
API identifierproductType2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5025 

Product type 3

A group to which the product belongs.

Product type 3 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 112.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product type 3 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct type 3Integer
SQL nameProdTp3The database field name.
API identifierproductType3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6103 

Product type 4

A group to which the product belongs.

Product type 4 texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 113.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Product type 4 in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct type 4Integer
SQL nameProdTp4The database field name.
API identifierproductType4The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6104 

Quantity per unit

The quantity of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameStUnRtThe database field name.
API identifierquantityPerUnitThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5990 

Repl. product

The replacement product. When you type the product number in the order line, the number is automatically replaced with this replacement product.

This is for example relevant for discontinued products.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProduct no.Text (40)
SQL nameRepProdThe database field name.
API identifierreplacementProductNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2602 
Table 27. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
ProductReplacementProduct
  • Repl. product
Search productReplacementSearchProduct
  • Repl. product

Required margin

The target margin for the product.

This field can be used in order registration as an information. There is no further logic on this field.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainMarginDecimal
SQL nameDesMrgThe database field name.
API identifierrequiredMarginThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2592 

Responsible

The employee responsible for keeping the product information up to date.

The Empl. no. is a unique number identifying one specific Employee.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainEmpl. no.Integer
SQL nameRspThe database field name.
API identifierofficial1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number3074 
Table 28. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
AssociateOfficial1
  • Responsible

Responsible 2

The employee responsible for keeping the product information up to date.

The Empl. no. is a unique number identifying one specific Employee.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainEmpl. no.Integer
SQL nameRsp2The database field name.
API identifierofficial2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6122 
Table 29. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
AssociateOfficial2
  • Responsible 2

Rounding amount

The truncate amount for the product.

If you select the Suggest price after discount and rounding check box in the Proc. method 1 field, the net price is rounded off to the nearest amount divisible by the entered truncate amount for the product. This requires that you do not save between entering the product number and referring to the price and discount matrix.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainAmountDecimal
SQL nameTrAmThe database field name.
API identifierroundingAmountThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6402 

Sales price addition %

The percentage by which you want the prices to rise.

If an order number and product number are entered in the voucher line, using a voucher type having selected 1 - Update order in the Update order field, an order line will be added to the order when updating the voucher. Domestic amount from voucher line will be used as price on order line, raised with the percentage from this field.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainPercentDecimal
SQL nameSPrAddThe database field name.
API identifiersalesPriceAdditionThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number7210 

Scan doc. no.

The ID of the scanned document.

Is used in connection with Visma Document Center.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainNo.Integer
SQL namePLDNoThe database field name.
API identifierscanDocumentNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11184 

Scan status

The status of the scanned document.

Is used in connection with Visma Document Center.

A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:
1 - Scanned document
2 - Document on flow
4 - Document finished
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainScan statusInteger
SQL namePLDFlowThe database field name.
API identifierscanStatusThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11185 

Show on Web

The information about the product is presented on the web.

This field is a visualisation of the Show on Web check box on the External page in the Proc. method 7 field.

The field is intended for use in the Zpider solution.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainBooleanInteger
Memory fieldYesThe value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database.
API identifiershowOnWebThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number8307 

Source country

The Country of origin for the Product.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainCountry no.Integer
SQL nameSrcCtryThe database field name.
API identifiersourceCountryNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number18138 
Table 30. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
CountrySourceCountry
  • Source country

Stock measure

The display unit of stock values.

When joining the Stock balance, Shipment or Stock change tables to the order lines, the stock level fields, cost prices and consignment costs are recalculated according to the value in this field.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:
1 - Quantity in base unit
2 - Length
3 - Area
4 - Volume
5 - Net weight
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainStock measureInteger
SQL nameMeasureThe database field name.
API identifierstockMeasureThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5955 

Suspended

The product is no longer in use.

Suspended is set automatically when updating a product from Incoming product data that the supplier wants deleted. It may also be set manually. The field is a visualisation of the processing method Suspended.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainBooleanInteger
Memory fieldYesThe value in this field is only displayed in the program, it is not stored in the database.
API identifiersuspendedThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number18458 

Tare

The packaging weight of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

Allows prices and discounts to be specified not only on the basis of the ordinary quantity field but also the Tare field.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameTareUThe database field name.
API identifiertareThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2597 

To

Used in conjunction with the From field for calculating the quantity.

When the quantity is calculated as the difference between to and from, it can be expressed as a quantity, time, date or factor, depending on the quantity format selected on the Editing page in the Proc. method 1 field in the Order line table.

In connection with hire/loan, you can enter the hire start date in this field when the quantity format is set to date.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameToNoThe database field name.
API identifiertoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5047 

Trans. information 1

Optional field for additional information.

This field is overridden by the corresponding field from the Structure table in the Product transaction table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainTrans. information @Text (40)
SQL nameTrInf1The database field name.
API identifiertransactionInformation1The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6113 

Trans. information 2

Optional field for additional information.

This field is overridden by the corresponding field from the Structure table in the Product transaction table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainTrans. information @Text (40)
SQL nameTrInf2The database field name.
API identifiertransactionInformation2The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6114 

Trans. information 3

Optional field for additional information.

This field is overridden by the corresponding field from the Structure table in the Product transaction table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainTrans. information @Text (40)
SQL nameTrInf3The database field name.
API identifiertransactionInformation3The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number7078 

Trans. information 4

Optional field for additional information.

This field is overridden by the corresponding field from the Structure table in the Product transaction table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainTrans. information @Text (40)
SQL nameTrInf4The database field name.
API identifiertransactionInformation4The API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number7079 

Transaction type

The transaction type for the product defining the way the goods move in or out of the warehouse.

Note:
It is not possible to change the transaction type in an order line that is Reserved, Picked or Finished; in this case you must withdraw the reservation.
A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:
1 - Sales
Normal sale.

The goods move out of the warehouse.

2 - Hire
Hire against payment.

The goods move out of the warehouse.

3 - Loan
Loan of goods without payment.

The goods move out of the warehouse.

4 - Adjustment/internal issue
Registration of goods that have been lost.

The goods move out of the warehouse.

5 - Further processing
Internal consumption of goods for further processing.

The goods move out of the warehouse.

6 - Purchase
Goods that are purchased from other parties.

The goods move into of the warehouse.

7 - Production
Goods produced by the company itself.

The goods move into of the warehouse.

8 - Stock transfer
Transfer of stock between the company's own warehouses.

You can also use this transaction type when performing a stock transfer of unrealised transactions. It is not possible to reserve or finish inflow transactions on stock transfer orders.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainTransaction typeInteger
SQL nameTrTpThe database field name.
API identifiertransactionTypeThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number6399 

UNSPSC no.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainString of length 12Text (12)
SQL nameUnspscNoThe database field name.
API identifierunspscNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number19692 

VAT and accounting group

The VAT and accounting group for the product that controls tax processing and determines which accounts and organisational units are used for accounting.

Together with the account set on the Order line, this field refers to the VAT- and accounting information table.

If you do not complete this field in the Product table, the Default VAT and accounting group is retrieved from the Company information table.

VAT and accounting group texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 17.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a VAT and accounting group in the Text table.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultYesThis field is visible by default in the table display.
DomainVAT and accounting groupInteger
SQL nameProdGrThe database field name.
API identifiertaxAndAccountingGroupThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2580 
Table 31. Table relations
To tablePurposeFrom columnsTo columnsComments
VAT and accounting groupTaxAndAccGroup
  • VAT and accounting group

Visma ID

The ID of the scanned document.

Is used in connection with Visma Document Center.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainNo.Integer
SQL nameWfIdThe database field name.
API identifiervismaIdThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number11183 

Volume

The volume of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

This field allows prices and discounts to be specified not only on the basis of the ordinary Quantity field but also the Volume field. This field is totalled in the order head in order to be able to calculate the order's total volume.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameVolUThe database field name.
API identifiervolumeThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2598 

Wage rate no.

The rate to be used for the wage sort in the transfer to the wage file.

The value is transferred to the Appointment table. It will be used when appointments are exported to file and sent to the wage system.

Wage rate no. texts for different languages can be defined in the Text table. These texts has text type 15.
Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a Wage rate no. in the Text table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainWage rate no.Integer
SQL nameWageRtNoThe database field name.
API identifierpayrollRateNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number13772 

Wage sort

The type of wage used in the transfer to the wage file.

The value is transferred to the Appointment table. It will be used when appointments are exported to file and sent to the wage system.

Tip:
It is recommended to place the wage sort in the Product table, to avoid typing it in the Appointment table for each appointment.
Note:
There is no validation against the Wage sort register. The value must correspond with the payroll system.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainWage sortText (10)
SQL nameWageSrtThe database field name.
API identifierpayrollSortThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number2591 

Web page

The address of a web page for the product.

Double-click or press * to open the web page in your web browser.

Alternatively the field can be used to refer to documents or other files. Double-click or press * in the empty field to open the Select file dialog box.

On the Design tab, in the Insert group, you can click on Web page to visualise the document or web page on the screen.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainWeb pageText (260)
SQL nameWebPg2The database field name.
API identifierwebPageThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number8731 

Width

The width of the unit used to specify the stock for the product.

The value is suggested in the Order line table if it is not overridden by the field in the Unit or Barcode table.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainQuantityDecimal
SQL nameWdtUThe database field name.
API identifierwidthThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
Number5902 

Control columns

Control columns include information about who has changed the record last and when, and which process that is currently editing the record.

Changed by provenance

The provenance for the record change.

A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:

0 - None

1 - UI

10 - External API

20 - GAiA

21 - AI Connect

100 - Internal service

101 - Task automation

102 - AutoInvoice download

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProvenanceInteger
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameChPvnThe database field name.
API identifierchangedByProvenanceThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Changed by user

The name of the user that changed the record.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainUser nameText (24)
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameChUsrThe database field name.
API identifierchangedByUserThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Changed date

The date when the record was changed.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainDateInteger
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameChDtThe database field name.
API identifierchangedDateThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Changed time

The time when the record was changed.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainTimeInteger
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameChTmThe database field name.
API identifierchangedTimeThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Changed time stamp

The date and time when the record was changed.

The field is updated with the UTC time.

This value can be used by external systems to replicate changed data. The column is indexed. 

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainDate/timeDateTime
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameChTsThe database field name.
API identifierchangedTimestampThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Created by provenance

The provenance for the record creation.

A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:

0 - None

1 - UI

10 - External API

20 - GAiA

21 - AI Connect

100 - Internal service

101 - Task automation

102 - AutoInvoice download

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProvenanceInteger
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameCrePvnThe database field name.
API identifiercreatedByProvenanceThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Created by user

The name of the user that created the record.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainUser nameText (24)
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameCreUsrThe database field name.
API identifiercreatedByUserThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Created date

The date when the record was created.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainDateInteger
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameCreDtThe database field name.
API identifiercreatedDateThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Created time

The time when the record was created.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainTimeInteger
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameCreTmThe database field name.
API identifiercreatedTimeThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Created time stamp

The date and time when the record was created.

The field is updated with the UTC time.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainDate/timeDateTime
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameCreTsThe database field name.
API identifiercreatedTimestampThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Edit status

The current status of the record.

A look-up in this field gives you the following list of possible values:

0 - Unchanged: The record is read, but not changed.

1 - Inserted: The record is new.

2 - Changed: The record is changed.

3 - Deleted: The record is deleted.

PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainEdit statusInteger
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameLckStThe database field name.
API identifiereditStatusThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 

Process no

The Process no. from the Active company process table which is currently using or has control of this record.

Note:
If you double-click or press * in this field, you can look up a value in the related table.
PropertyValueDescription
Visible by defaultNoThis field is not visible by default in the table display.
DomainProcess no.Integer
Write AccessNoneYou are not allowed to modify the value in this field.
SQL nameChPrcThe database field name.
API identifierlockedByProcessNoThe API identifier used in GraphQL.
NumberA unique column number. 
Table 32. Table relations
To table Purpose From columns To columns Comments
Active company process CompanyProcess Process no. Process no.